1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1521–1560 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Motorcycle & ATV Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of hobby-ready motorcycle & atv storage space. Riders use the 12×20 footprint to park three to four motorcycles or a pair of ATVs side-by-side with a workbench at the back. Gardeners and small.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Storage·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Hurricane Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of hobby-ready motorcycle & atv storage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Motorcycle & ATV Storage layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of hobby-ready motorcycle & atv storage space. Riders use the 12×20 footprint to park three to four motorcycles or a pair of ATVs side-by-side with a workbench at the back. Gardeners and small property owners add a 12×20 roll-up so a quad or a side-by-side rolls straight in. Lockable, dry, and cheaper over five years than self-storage.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & ATV Storage works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv storage
Everyday motorcycle & atv storage
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage cost?

A 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed | Steel and Stud, From $4,200

12

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,800$4,200SAVE $600
or $88/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Equipment & Hay Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage owners stash a compact tractor, a brush hog implement, and a few rolls of hay under.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Shed·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,200$4,800Save $600
or as low as $88/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$4,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Open Gable Option
  • Snow Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-EQUIPMENT-HAY-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 equipment & hay shed.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Equipment & Hay Shed layout.

Looking for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage owners stash a compact tractor, a brush hog implement, and a few rolls of hay under a 12×20 metal barn. Twelve-foot legs clear a tractor with a ROPS up. Open one gable end for drive-through or close it for full weatherproofing, both ship in the same kit.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Hay Shed works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay shed
Everyday equipment & hay shed
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay shed + seasonal storage
equipment & hay shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$88/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 equipment & hay shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $88/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 equipment & hay shed cost?

A 12×20 equipment & hay shed from Steel and Stud starts at $4,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $88/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 equipment & hay shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 equipment & hay shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 equipment & hay shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 equipment & hay shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $88/month on a 12×20 equipment & hay shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 equipment & hay shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 equipment & hay shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×20 equipment & hay shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×20 Pool House / Cabana

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space. Pool owners spec a 12×20 steel building as a changing room, towel storage, and pump-equipment housing in one. Wainscoting in a contrasting color reads.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
12×30
longer
$5,300
14×20
wider
$4,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • French Door
  • Wainscoting
  • 17 Colors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space. Pool owners spec a 12×20 steel building as a changing room, towel storage, and pump-equipment housing in one. Wainscoting in a contrasting color reads residential, and a French door plus two windows opens it to the deck. Insulated walls keep chlorine smells out of the pumps.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×20 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 pool house / cabana typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×20 Pool House / Cabana

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×20 Home Office / Studio

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Home Office / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Home Office / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Home Office / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Home Office / Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×20 home office / studio? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. A detached home office on a 12×20 footprint costs less than a basement renovation and.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Studio·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
14×20
wider
$4,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Interior Partition
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-HOME-OFFICE-STUDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 home office / studio.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 home office / studio? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Home Office / Studio layout.

Looking for a 12×20 home office / studio? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. A detached home office on a 12×20 footprint costs less than a basement renovation and permits as an accessory structure in most counties, spec R-19 fiberglass batt, a mini-split, and a partition wall to split it into a focus room and a meeting nook. Three 12×20 windows bring in daylight without blowing the energy budget.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Studio works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Home Office / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / studio
Everyday home office / studio
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / studio + seasonal storage
home office / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Home Office / Studio, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 home office / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Home Office / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Home Office / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 home office / studio cost?

A 12×20 home office / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 home office / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 home office / studio?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 home office / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 home office / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 home office / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 home office / studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 home office / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 home office / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 home office / studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 home office / studio typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×20 Home Office / Studio

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure potting shed with copper colored roof and open french doors in a garden

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex | Steel and Stud, From $4,200

12

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,800$4,200SAVE $600
or $88/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Garden & Greenhouse Annex

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gardeners pair a 12×20 utility shed with a lean-to for potting and seed-starting. Galvalume.

You’re viewing:Garden & Greenhouse Annex·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,200$4,800Save $600
or as low as $88/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$4,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume
  • Skylights
  • Lean-To Add
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-GARDEN-GREENHOUSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft shop

Garden & Greenhouse Annex layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gardeners pair a 12×20 utility shed with a lean-to for potting and seed-starting. Galvalume bare-metal finish keeps cost down, and a row of skylights brings in light without the cost of a full polycarbonate greenhouse. Wide doors clear a wheelbarrow and a small tiller.

💡 Pro tip:Garden & Greenhouse Annex works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden & Greenhouse Annex.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden & Greenhouse Annex spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden & Greenhouse Annex.

DAILY USEEveryday garden & greenhouse annex
Everyday garden & greenhouse annex
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden & greenhouse annex.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden & greenhouse annex + seasonal storage
garden & greenhouse annex + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$88/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $88/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden & Greenhouse Annex shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden & Greenhouse Annex · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden & Greenhouse Annex also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden & Greenhouse Annex questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex cost?

A 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex from Steel and Stud starts at $4,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $88/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden & greenhouse annex ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden & greenhouse annex different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $88/month on a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden & Greenhouse Annex quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure potting shed with copper colored roof and open french doors in a garden

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site | Steel and Stud, From $5,400

12

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,150$5,400SAVE $750
or $113/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Mobile Office / Job Site

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site, engineered for code-compliant business use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of code-compliant mobile office / job site space. Contractors and small property owners use a 12×20 building as a job-trailer alternative, locked tool storage on one end, plan table and laptop.

You’re viewing:Mobile Office / Job Site·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,400$6,150Save $750
or as low as $113/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$5,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • Double Doors
  • Smart Lock
  • Permit Drawings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-MOBILE-OFFICE-JOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 mobile office / job site.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of code-compliant mobile office / job site space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Mobile Office / Job Site layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of code-compliant mobile office / job site space. Contractors and small property owners use a 12×20 building as a job-trailer alternative, locked tool storage on one end, plan table and laptop bench on the other. Double doors on a gable end let you load palletized material; a smart lock handles after-hours pickups by the crew.

💡 Pro tip:Mobile Office / Job Site works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Office / Job Site.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Office / Job Site spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Office / Job Site.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile office / job site
Everyday mobile office / job site
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile office / job site.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile office / job site + seasonal storage
mobile office / job site + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$113/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 mobile office / job site is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $113/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Office / Job Site shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mobile Office / Job Site · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Office / Job Site also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Office / Job Site questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 mobile office / job site cost?

A 12×20 mobile office / job site from Steel and Stud starts at $5,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $113/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 mobile office / job site price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mobile office / job site ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 mobile office / job site?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile office / job site different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 mobile office / job site need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 mobile office / job site delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 mobile office / job site without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $113/month on a 12×20 mobile office / job site.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 mobile office / job site?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 mobile office / job site in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 12×20 mobile office / job site meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Office / Job Site quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Hobby Room / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Hobbyists carve out a 12×20 hobby room for quilting, pottery, painting, or model railroading.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room / She Shed·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • 30×30 Windows
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-HOBBY-ROOM-SHE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 hobby room / she shed.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑12′ × 20′ · 240 ground + loft

Hobby Room / She Shed layout.

Looking for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Hobbyists carve out a 12×20 hobby room for quilting, pottery, painting, or model railroading, anything that needs uninterrupted floor space and decent light. Two-tone wainscoting, a pair of 12×20 windows, and a 36" walk-in keep it residential-looking from the patio.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room / She Shed works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room / She Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room / she shed
Everyday hobby room / she shed
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room / she shed + seasonal storage
hobby room / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 hobby room / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 hobby room / she shed cost?

A 12×20 hobby room / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 hobby room / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 hobby room / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 hobby room / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 hobby room / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 hobby room / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 hobby room / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 hobby room / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×20 hobby room / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby room / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Single slope rv metal cover in espresso bronze with motorhome parked on a gravel pad

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact) | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact), built for daily backyard use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday rv & boat cover (compact) space. Small property owners with a fishing boat on a single-axle trailer or a Class-B camper van use the 12×20 carport metal cover for UV and hail.

You’re viewing:RV & Boat Cover (Compact)·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Open Gables
  • Hail Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-RV-BOAT-COVER-COBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact).

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday rv & boat cover (compact) space.

RV BAYDaily Driver12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft · tall walls

RV & Boat Cover (Compact) layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday rv & boat cover (compact) space. Small property owners with a fishing boat on a single-axle trailer or a Class-B camper van use the 12×20 carport metal cover for UV and hail protection. Twelve-foot legs clear most pop-tops; open both gable ends so you back in and pull out without cranking the wheel.

💡 Pro tip:RV & Boat Cover (Compact) works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Cover (Compact).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Cover (Compact) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Cover (Compact).

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat cover (compact)
Everyday rv & boat cover (compact)
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat cover (compact).
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat cover (compact) + seasonal storage
rv & boat cover (compact) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact), what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Cover (Compact) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Cover (Compact) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Cover (Compact) also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Cover (Compact) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) cost?

A 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat cover (compact) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact)?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat cover (compact) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact).

What warranty comes with the 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Cover (Compact) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Single slope rv metal cover in espresso bronze with motorhome parked on a gravel pad

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building workshop at dusk with open roll-up bay and lit interior workbenches

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×32 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×32 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of clear bench space behind the bumper.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building workshop at dusk with open roll-up bay and lit interior workbenches

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 carport for truck + trailer.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Carport for Truck + Trailer layout.

Looking for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 12×32 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds rain off both sides without gutter overflow.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Truck + Trailer works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 12×32 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel barn with cupola weathervane and sliding doors on an autumn lakeside lawn

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Boat & RV Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & rv storage cover space. Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×32 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C.

You’re viewing:Boat & RV Storage Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Vertical
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • UV-Resistant Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-BOAT-RV-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 boat & rv storage cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & rv storage cover space.

RV BAYDaily Driver12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft · tall walls

Boat & RV Storage Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & rv storage cover space. Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×32 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C RVs (under 28′) also tuck inside at 12-14′ leg height. Saves $1,200+ a year over commercial storage lots.

💡 Pro tip:Boat & RV Storage Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & RV Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & RV Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & RV Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & rv storage cover
Everyday boat & rv storage cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & rv storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
boat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 boat & rv storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & RV Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & RV Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & RV Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & RV Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover cost?

A 12×32 boat & rv storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & rv storage cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & RV Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel barn with cupola weathervane and sliding doors on an autumn lakeside lawn

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building man cave with open French doors revealing a furnished lounge at dusk

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard) | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Storage Building (Backyard)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard), built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement.

You’re viewing:Storage Building (Backyard)·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 storage building (backyard).

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Storage Building (Backyard) layout.

Looking for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 12×32 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door makes daily access easy.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building (Backyard) works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Storage Building (Backyard) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building (Backyard).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building (Backyard) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building (Backyard).

DAILY USEEveryday storage building (backyard)
Everyday storage building (backyard)
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building (backyard).
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
storage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard), what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 storage building (backyard) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building (Backyard) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Storage Building (Backyard) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building (Backyard) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building (Backyard) also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building (Backyard) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 storage building (backyard) cost?

A 12×32 storage building (backyard) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 storage building (backyard) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 storage building (backyard) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 storage building (backyard) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 storage building (backyard) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 storage building (backyard).

What warranty comes with the 12×32 storage building (backyard)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 storage building (backyard) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 storage building (backyard) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 storage building (backyard) typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building (Backyard) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building man cave with open French doors revealing a furnished lounge at dusk

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green prefab metal building cottage shed with white doors surrounded by flower gardens

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green prefab metal building cottage shed with white doors surrounded by flower gardens

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×32.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 workshop / hobby room.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×32 enclosed for a dedicated 384 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×32 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 12×32 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 workshop / hobby room typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 home office / backyard studio.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 384 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 12×32 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 home office / backyard studio typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel barn with white sliding doors and round hay bales stacked beside it

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×32 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,950
12×32
this size
$6,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 hay & feed storage cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×32 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 12×32 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel barn with white sliding doors and round hay bales stacked beside it

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 384 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×32 Pool House / Cabana

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×32 as a pool house with a covered changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×32 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×32 enclosed plus a 12×32 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×32 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 pool house / cabana typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×32 Pool House / Cabana

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 tool shed for contractors.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×32 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 12×32 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 tool shed for contractors typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,950
12×32
this size
$6,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with black trim and open roll-up in saguaro desert

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Single-Vehicle Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick this footprint when they want enclosed parking for a.

You’re viewing:Single-Vehicle Garage·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SINGLE-VEHICLE-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 single-vehicle garage.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Single-Vehicle Garage layout.

Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick this footprint when they want enclosed parking for a full-size pickup or SUV with real walking room down both sides. 14 feet clears an F-150 mirror-to-mirror with about 18 inches of breathing room each side, and the 24-foot length leaves 4-5 feet behind the tailgate for storage shelves.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Vehicle Garage works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Vehicle Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Vehicle Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Vehicle Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-vehicle garage
Everyday single-vehicle garage
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-vehicle garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-vehicle garage + seasonal storage
single-vehicle garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 single-vehicle garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Vehicle Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Vehicle Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Vehicle Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Vehicle Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage cost?

A 14×25 single-vehicle garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 single-vehicle garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-vehicle garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 single-vehicle garage?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-vehicle garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 single-vehicle garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 single-vehicle garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 single-vehicle garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 single-vehicle garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 single-vehicle garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 single-vehicle garage typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Vehicle Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with black trim and open roll-up in saguaro desert

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

14×25 Backyard Workshop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists building a dedicated woodworking or metal shop find 14×25 hits the.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation Ready
  • 30×30 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 backyard workshop.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists building a dedicated woodworking or metal shop find 14×25 hits the right balance: enough wall length for a 12-foot workbench plus tool storage, but small enough to skip commercial zoning in most counties. The taller 12-foot leg height accommodates dust collection ducting and overhead lighting.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 backyard workshop cost?

A 14×25 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 backyard workshop typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

14×25 Backyard Workshop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel structure with black roll-up door and white entry door near a wooded lake

14×25 Storage Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who’ve outgrown a 14×25 plastic shed step up to a 14×25 steel storage shed.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 storage shed.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who’ve outgrown a 14×25 plastic shed step up to a 14×25 steel storage shed to consolidate lawn equipment, seasonal gear, and household overflow. The 350 sq ft footprint holds a riding mower, two push mowers, a snowblower, and still leaves a back wall for shelving.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 storage shed cost?

A 14×25 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 storage shed?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 storage shed typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel structure with black roll-up door and white entry door near a wooded lake

14×25 Storage Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sand colored prefab metal building pool house with wood accent wall and french doors at evening

14×25 Pool House

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with backyard pools convert a 14×25 prefab building into a changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 pool house.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with backyard pools convert a 14×25 prefab building into a changing room, pump house, and covered patio combo. Split the interior with a partition wall: 10 feet of enclosed storage for chemicals and equipment, 14 feet of open lounge space facing the pool deck.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Pool House, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 pool house cost?

A 14×25 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 pool house?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 pool house typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sand colored prefab metal building pool house with wood accent wall and french doors at evening

14×25 Pool House

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

14×25 Home Office Studio

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Home Office Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Home Office Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Home Office Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Home Office Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers and creatives use the 14×25 footprint as a detached home office or art studio.

You’re viewing:Home Office Studio·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 30×30 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-HOME-OFFICE-STUDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 home office studio.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Home Office Studio layout.

Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers and creatives use the 14×25 footprint as a detached home office or art studio away from the main house. The 14-foot width fits a full desk wall plus a small meeting area, and R-19 batt insulation with a vapor barrier turns the steel shell into year-round climate-controlled space.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office Studio works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Home Office Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office Studio spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office studio
Everyday home office studio
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office studio + seasonal storage
home office studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Home Office Studio, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 home office studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Home Office Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Home Office Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office Studio also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 home office studio cost?

A 14×25 home office studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 home office studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 home office studio?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 home office studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 home office studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 home office studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 home office studio.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 home office studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 home office studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 home office studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 home office studio typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

14×25 Home Office Studio

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,800

12

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,600$5,800SAVE $800
or $121/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Tractor & Equipment Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage farmers and gardeners cover a compact tractor, attachments, and hay storage.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Equipment Shed·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,800$6,600Save $800
or as low as $121/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$5,600
14×25
this size
$5,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Open Sidewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-TRACTOR-EQUIPMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 tractor & equipment shed.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft shop

Tractor & Equipment Shed layout.

Looking for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage farmers and gardeners cover a compact tractor, attachments, and hay storage under one 14×25 roof. The 14-foot leg height clears most sub-compact tractors with a loader arm raised, and a lean-to addition on the 24-foot sidewall handles overflow implement storage.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Equipment Shed works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & equipment shed
Everyday tractor & equipment shed
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & equipment shed + seasonal storage
tractor & equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$121/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 tractor & equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $121/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed cost?

A 14×25 tractor & equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $121/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $121/month on a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal building kit cabin with porch and American flag overlooking a mountain sunrise

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Hunting Cabin Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 14×25 hunting cabin shell fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Hunters and weekend cabin owners use a 14×25 steel building as a base-camp shell.

You’re viewing:Hunting Cabin Shell·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Gravel Anchor Kit
  • Insulation Ready
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-HUNTING-CABIN-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 hunting cabin shell.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 hunting cabin shell fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑14′ × 25′ · 350 ground + loft

Hunting Cabin Shell layout.

Our 14×25 hunting cabin shell fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Hunters and weekend cabin owners use a 14×25 steel building as a base-camp shell on remote acreage. The pre-engineered frame ships in 4-6 weeks, anchors to a packed-gravel pad, and gives you 350 sq ft to finish out with a bunk wall, kitchenette, and wood stove on your timeline.

💡 Pro tip:Hunting Cabin Shell works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hunting Cabin Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hunting Cabin Shell spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hunting Cabin Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday hunting cabin shell
Everyday hunting cabin shell
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hunting cabin shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
hunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 hunting cabin shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hunting Cabin Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hunting Cabin Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hunting Cabin Shell also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hunting Cabin Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 hunting cabin shell cost?

A 14×25 hunting cabin shell from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 hunting cabin shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 hunting cabin shell?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 hunting cabin shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 hunting cabin shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 hunting cabin shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 hunting cabin shell.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 hunting cabin shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 hunting cabin shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 14×25 hunting cabin shell for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hunting cabin shell to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hunting Cabin Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal building kit cabin with porch and American flag overlooking a mountain sunrise

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

14×25 Backyard Gym

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Backyard Gym | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Backyard Gym
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Backyard Gym

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Backyard Gym, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 14×25 backyard gym fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Garage-gym builders pick the 14×25 when a 14×25 shed feels cramped under a power rack.

You’re viewing:Backyard Gym·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • Double-Bubble Insulation
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-BACKYARD-GYMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 backyard gym.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 backyard gym fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑14′ × 25′ · 350 ground + loft

Backyard Gym layout.

Our 14×25 backyard gym fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Garage-gym builders pick the 14×25 when a 14×25 shed feels cramped under a power rack. 12-foot leg height clears overhead barbell presses and pull-up bars, and the 24-foot length splits cleanly into a lifting half and a cardio half without bumping equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Gym works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Backyard Gym in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Gym.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Gym spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Gym.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard gym
Everyday backyard gym
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard gym.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard gym + seasonal storage
backyard gym + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Backyard Gym, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 backyard gym is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Gym shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Backyard Gym buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Backyard Gym

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Gym · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Gym also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Gym questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 backyard gym cost?

A 14×25 backyard gym from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 backyard gym price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard gym ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 backyard gym?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard gym different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 backyard gym need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 backyard gym delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 backyard gym without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 backyard gym.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 backyard gym?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 backyard gym in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 14×25 backyard gym for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a backyard gym to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Gym quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

14×25 Backyard Gym

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed interior with lawn mowers, ladders, shelving bins and organized tool storage

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Motorcycle & Toy Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Riders with 2-3 motorcycles, a side-by-side, or jet skis pick the 14×25.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Toy Garage·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×8 Roll-Up Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-MOTORCYCLE-TOY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Motorcycle & Toy Garage layout.

Our 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Riders with 2-3 motorcycles, a side-by-side, or jet skis pick the 14×25 over a tight single-car garage because it parks the toys side-by-side with room for a maintenance bench. The 14×25 roll-up door fits a UTV with windshield up, and the longer footprint lets you walk around each machine.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Toy Garage works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Toy Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & toy garage
Everyday motorcycle & toy garage
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & toy garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Toy Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Toy Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Toy Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Toy Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage cost?

A 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Toy Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed interior with lawn mowers, ladders, shelving bins and organized tool storage

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit she shed with white French doors, string lights, and paver patio

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building | Steel and Stud, From $5,800

12

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,600$5,800SAVE $800
or $121/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25She-Shed Garden Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of rugged she-shed garden building space. Gardeners build out a 14×25 utility shed as a potting station, seed-starting greenhouse, and tool wall combined. Wainscoting on the lower 3 feet hides.

You’re viewing:She-Shed Garden Building·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,800$6,600Save $800
or as low as $121/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$5,600
14×25
this size
$5,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Skylight Ready
  • Wainscoting
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SHE-SHED-GARDEN-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 she-shed garden building.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. 14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of rugged she-shed garden building space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑14′ × 25′ · 350 ground + loft

She-Shed Garden Building layout.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of rugged she-shed garden building space. Gardeners build out a 14×25 utility shed as a potting station, seed-starting greenhouse, and tool wall combined. Wainscoting on the lower 3 feet hides dirt and mud splatter, and skylight upgrades on a Boxed Eave roof flood the workbench with daylight without adding wall windows.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed Garden Building works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 She-Shed Garden Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed Garden Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed Garden Building spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed Garden Building.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed garden building
Everyday she-shed garden building
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed garden building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed garden building + seasonal storage
she-shed garden building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$121/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 she-shed garden building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $121/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed Garden Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 She-Shed Garden Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 She-Shed Garden Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed Garden Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed Garden Building also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed Garden Building questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 she-shed garden building cost?

A 14×25 she-shed garden building from Steel and Stud starts at $5,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $121/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 she-shed garden building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed garden building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 she-shed garden building?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed garden building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 she-shed garden building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 she-shed garden building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 she-shed garden building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $121/month on a 14×25 she-shed garden building.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 she-shed garden building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 she-shed garden building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×25 she-shed garden building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed Garden Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit she shed with white French doors, string lights, and paver patio

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

14×25 Small Business Shop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Small Business Shop | Steel and Stud, From $7,000

12

14×25 Small Business Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,000$7,000SAVE $1,000
or $146/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Small Business Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Small Business Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 14×25 small business shop packs 350 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Solo trades, mobile mechanics, small-engine repair, mobile detailers, use a.

You’re viewing:Small Business Shop·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,000$8,000Save $1,000
or as low as $146/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$6,800
14×25
this size
$7,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Walk-In + Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SMALL-BUSINESS-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 small business shop.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 14×25 small business shop packs 350 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Small Business Shop layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 14×25 small business shop packs 350 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Solo trades, mobile mechanics, small-engine repair, mobile detailers, use a 14×25 metal building as a permitted commercial shop on residential or commercial-light parcels. The footprint stays under most county commercial-occupancy thresholds while still fitting a customer vehicle plus tool storage.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Shop works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Small Business Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Shop spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday small business shop
Everyday small business shop
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business shop + seasonal storage
small business shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Small Business Shop, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$146/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 small business shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $146/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Small Business Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Small Business Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Shop also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 small business shop cost?

A 14×25 small business shop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $146/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 small business shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 small business shop?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 small business shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 small business shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 small business shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $146/month on a 14×25 small business shop.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 small business shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 small business shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 14×25 small business shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

14×25 Small Business Shop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with timber framing beside a country pond

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Drive-Through Equipment Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay, built for daily backyard use.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of everyday drive-through equipment bay space. Property owners with multiple machines spec a drive-through layout, two roll-up doors mounted on opposite 24-foot sidewalls let you pull an ATV.

You’re viewing:Drive-Through Equipment Bay·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Drive-Thru Layout
  • Dual Sidewall Roll-Ups
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-DRIVE-THROUGH-EQBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 drive-through equipment bay.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. 14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of everyday drive-through equipment bay space.

TruckTrailer14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft pass-through

Drive-Through Equipment Bay layout.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of everyday drive-through equipment bay space. Property owners with multiple machines spec a drive-through layout, two roll-up doors mounted on opposite 24-foot sidewalls let you pull an ATV, mower, or trailer straight in one side and out the other without backing or three-point turns. The pull-through bay layout doubles as a wash-down zone in summer and a covered hitching area in winter, and the open run-through means no tight 90-degree corners around a single-door pivot point.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Equipment Bay works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Drive-Through Equipment Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Drive-Through Equipment Bay spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Drive-Through Equipment Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday drive-through equipment bay
Everyday drive-through equipment bay
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a drive-through equipment bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdrive-through equipment bay + seasonal storage
drive-through equipment bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 drive-through equipment bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Drive-Through Equipment Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Drive-Through Equipment Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Drive-Through Equipment Bay also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Drive-Through Equipment Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay cost?

A 14×25 drive-through equipment bay from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 drive-through equipment bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud drive-through equipment bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud drive-through equipment bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 drive-through equipment bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 drive-through equipment bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 drive-through equipment bay typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Drive-Through Equipment Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with timber framing beside a country pond

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black roll-up door and stone landscaping on a wooded lot

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 14×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 14×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of clear bench space behind the bumper.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black roll-up door and stone landscaping on a wooded lot

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal carport with blue roof and attached garage sheltering a pickup by mountains

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 carport for truck + trailer.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Carport for Truck + Trailer layout.

Looking for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 14×30 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds rain off both sides without gutter overflow.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Truck + Trailer works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 14×30 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal carport with blue roof and attached garage sheltering a pickup by mountains

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open bay framed in wood beside a pond

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard) | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Storage Building (Backyard)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard), built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement.

You’re viewing:Storage Building (Backyard)·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 storage building (backyard).

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft shop

Storage Building (Backyard) layout.

Looking for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 14×30 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door makes daily access easy.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building (Backyard) works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Storage Building (Backyard) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building (Backyard).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building (Backyard) spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building (Backyard).

DAILY USEEveryday storage building (backyard)
Everyday storage building (backyard)
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building (backyard).
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
storage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard), what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 storage building (backyard) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building (Backyard) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Storage Building (Backyard) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building (Backyard) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building (Backyard) also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building (Backyard) questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 storage building (backyard) cost?

A 14×30 storage building (backyard) from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 storage building (backyard) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 storage building (backyard) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 storage building (backyard) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 storage building (backyard) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 storage building (backyard).

What warranty comes with the 14×30 storage building (backyard)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 storage building (backyard) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 storage building (backyard) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 storage building (backyard) typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building (Backyard) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open bay framed in wood beside a pond

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 14×30.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 workshop / hobby room.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Looking for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 14×30 enclosed for a dedicated 420 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 14×30 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 14×30 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 workshop / hobby room typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 home office / backyard studio.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Looking for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 420 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 14×30 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 home office / backyard studio typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,850

12

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,800$6,850SAVE $950
or $143/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 14×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,850$7,800Save $950
or as low as $143/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 hay & feed storage cover.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 14×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$143/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $143/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 14×30 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $143/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $143/month on a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Hip roof prefab metal building in warm wood brown with glass panels and exercise bike

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 420 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Hip roof prefab metal building in warm wood brown with glass panels and exercise bike

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart